Upload
others
View
3
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Applicator Help pages of
Sizing Flow ndashDimensioning of Flow meters
1 Overview 3
11 Basics 4
2 Sizing 5
21 General parameters 5
22 Process data 9
221 Process data 10
23 Sensor Pipe 17
24 Meter Operating Range 19
25 Calculated Results 20
26 Warnings 22
27 Button center 23
3 Custody transfer 25
4 Accessories 28
41 Accessories page 28
42 Activating a checkbox 28
43 Accessories within the order code 29
5 Fluid Properties page 31
51 General description 31
52 Parameter groups 35
521 Fluid information 35
522 Fluid Description 35
523 Basic Fluid Parameters 36
524 Constants 36
525 Typical Operating Conditions 37
526 Temperature Viscosity 37
527 Temperature Density 38
528 Temperature Heat capacity 38
529 Temperature Vapor pressure 38
5210 Gas mixture 38
5211 Fluid properties and results 39
5212 Reference values 40
5213 Measuring task 40
5214 Restriction on flowmeters 41
53 Setting reference conditions 41
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid 41
55 Import and Export of Fluids 42
56 Fluid Properties report 43
6 Compare size and sensor 44
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing) 44
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page) 45
7 Chart page 47
71 Introduction 47
72 General Parameters 47
73 Process data 47
74 Curves 47
75 Flow limits 47
76 Chart 48
8 Order Code 49
81 Order code 50
82 Order code options 51
83 Extended order code 51
831 General 51
832 Device parameter data settings 52
84 Button center 53
9 Conversion Calculator 55
10 Unit Defaults 56
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB) 57
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB) 57
112 Using Corrosion Check 59
12 Settings (Sizing Flow) 61
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines 63
131 General 63
132 Fluid engine 63
133 Gas engine 67
14 Print Sizing 68
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) 70
16 Online Update 75
1 Overview
Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in
many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections
accessories and calibrations
The main pages of Sizing Flow
Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also
depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can
decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function
Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be
displayed as a continuous list or in two columns
Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window
These pages are
Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter
Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo
Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter
Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range
Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories
Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values
Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process
temperature
Special functions and features of Sizing Flow
There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact
means of calling them are described in the manual
Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately
Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline
version
Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids
Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance
Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units
Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator
PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties
11 Basics
Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection
or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families
On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions
to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process
conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application
The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the
selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)
Parameter help
Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the
need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When
touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window
by clicking on the OK button
Back to top
2 Sizing
The sizing page is divided into three sections
21 General parameters
Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the
transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected
flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag
Measuring task
Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with
the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page
Fluid
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
53 Setting reference conditions 41
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid 41
55 Import and Export of Fluids 42
56 Fluid Properties report 43
6 Compare size and sensor 44
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing) 44
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page) 45
7 Chart page 47
71 Introduction 47
72 General Parameters 47
73 Process data 47
74 Curves 47
75 Flow limits 47
76 Chart 48
8 Order Code 49
81 Order code 50
82 Order code options 51
83 Extended order code 51
831 General 51
832 Device parameter data settings 52
84 Button center 53
9 Conversion Calculator 55
10 Unit Defaults 56
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB) 57
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB) 57
112 Using Corrosion Check 59
12 Settings (Sizing Flow) 61
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines 63
131 General 63
132 Fluid engine 63
133 Gas engine 67
14 Print Sizing 68
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) 70
16 Online Update 75
1 Overview
Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in
many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections
accessories and calibrations
The main pages of Sizing Flow
Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also
depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can
decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function
Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be
displayed as a continuous list or in two columns
Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window
These pages are
Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter
Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo
Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter
Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range
Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories
Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values
Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process
temperature
Special functions and features of Sizing Flow
There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact
means of calling them are described in the manual
Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately
Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline
version
Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids
Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance
Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units
Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator
PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties
11 Basics
Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection
or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families
On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions
to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process
conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application
The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the
selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)
Parameter help
Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the
need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When
touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window
by clicking on the OK button
Back to top
2 Sizing
The sizing page is divided into three sections
21 General parameters
Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the
transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected
flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag
Measuring task
Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with
the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page
Fluid
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
16 Online Update 75
1 Overview
Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in
many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections
accessories and calibrations
The main pages of Sizing Flow
Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also
depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can
decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function
Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be
displayed as a continuous list or in two columns
Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window
These pages are
Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter
Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo
Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter
Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range
Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories
Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values
Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process
temperature
Special functions and features of Sizing Flow
There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact
means of calling them are described in the manual
Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately
Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline
version
Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids
Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance
Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units
Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator
PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties
11 Basics
Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection
or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families
On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions
to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process
conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application
The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the
selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)
Parameter help
Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the
need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When
touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window
by clicking on the OK button
Back to top
2 Sizing
The sizing page is divided into three sections
21 General parameters
Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the
transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected
flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag
Measuring task
Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with
the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page
Fluid
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline
version
Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids
Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance
Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units
Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator
PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties
11 Basics
Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection
or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families
On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions
to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process
conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application
The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the
selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)
Parameter help
Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the
need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When
touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window
by clicking on the OK button
Back to top
2 Sizing
The sizing page is divided into three sections
21 General parameters
Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the
transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected
flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag
Measuring task
Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with
the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page
Fluid
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
2 Sizing
The sizing page is divided into three sections
21 General parameters
Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the
transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected
flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag
Measuring task
Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with
the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page
Fluid
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task
This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is
selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In
the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids
which begin with that letter
Properties
You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid
Properties
StandardState
Standard
The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the
relevant standards and processes used
Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable
Fluids no water (example
dummy)
Support points (linear
interpolation)
Yes
Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Ideal gas Yes
Gases user-defined (example
dummy)
Redlich-Kwong Yes
Gases gas mixtures (example
dummy)
NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas
Engine
No
Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in
preparation)
No
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already
known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas
properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -
are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid
properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with
officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)
State
The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or
saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set
of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable
Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at
the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning
message
Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all
calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT
automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter
state compatibility checking will also be affected
Tag
This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter
PrincipleSensor
The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on
the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a
specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only
The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation
Transmitter
After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is
available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Flowmeter
The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second
field indicates the device model These fields are not editable
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Order code
The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
22 Process data
The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After
the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later
The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more
details go to the Fluid Properties page
This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow
values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these
are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be
entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring
points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases
measurement error is influenced
Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the
Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to
be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the
selection of the general parameters see Section 21
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
221 Process data
Reference values
This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be
accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page
You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and
absolute units
Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)
Base unit Nm3time
Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)
Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time
Requested Flow
First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate
Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it
one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default
flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked
If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow
(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and
calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air
deliveryrdquo for compressed air
(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the
edited values)
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected
flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid
volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are
used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are
the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)
Pressure
The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the
operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When
you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial
calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)
You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page
Temperature
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for
the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties
When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal
field for initial calculation provided it is not locked
The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit
Defaults
Pressure minmax
If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it
but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the
limits of the process application
The limits are used to
check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation
Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates
Temperature minmax
If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal
value but they can be different in their particular adaptation
The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application
The limits are used to
Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature
Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa
Units
Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the
Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
are the ones that are displayed automatically
You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a
unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit
Calculated Fluid Properties
After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically
Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the
necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other
fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details
Density
The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be
entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves
differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field
For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference
temperatures
For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the
density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC
For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas
The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on
the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)
The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have
indicated on the Units page
Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density
in compliance with the standard IAPWS
Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when
you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for
granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Density normal (Gas applications)
The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal
density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu
Density standard (Gas applications)
The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The
reference conditions are defined on the Units page
When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)
Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu
Molar mass
Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)
Z-factor
The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The
factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine
Fluid Engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked
Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and
Viscosity were not locked before
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Gas engine
The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value
and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually
Viscosity
Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered
manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the
system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in
this input field
The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference
temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)
The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas
The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page
Vapor pressure
The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is
necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures
You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid
chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas
these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears
instead
The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure
difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply
Sound Velocity
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the
permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors
of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is
changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid
behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this
input field
Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg
density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing
How to lock applicator data
When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid
properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions
using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked
automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations
All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue
If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed
in italics so that you can easily recognize them
Data locking examples
Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of
the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts
the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound
velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator
If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not
locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the
temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered
independent of the temperature
Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends
Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all
operating conditions except requested flow
Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid
data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged
provided this is technically reasonable
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
23 Sensor Pipe
This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built
Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the
requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to
input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of
the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described
with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure
flowmeters
After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the
selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations
Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for
Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in
addition to common Prowirl flowmeters
Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters
There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe
dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available
including
bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)
bull ASME (B3610B3619)
bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56
bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input
After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe
size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Connection standard
Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the
corresponding process connections will be listed below
Material (sensor)
Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend
on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against
the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between
the fluid and sensor material
Process connection
Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and
temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the
selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but
if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed
Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which
displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected
process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal
temperaturepressure point)
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If
additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case
whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will
automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to
make the user aware of the change
24 Meter Operating Range
The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values
If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The
measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range
For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible
For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow
Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is
possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly
differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
25 Calculated Results
This section shows the calculated results of sizing
Requested flow
Indicates the values used for the calculation
Flow velocity
Flow velocity max
Pressure Loss
An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss
calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This
group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be
marginal and without any influence on your process
Velocity (meas tube)
This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation
refers to the nominal density
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Measured Error Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the
flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
Measured Error spec Volume
These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the
selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding
requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value
To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration
Measured Error Mass
These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for
Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the
corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead
of a value
Measured Error spec Mass
Reynolds No
The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further
sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions
Frequency
This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is
proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity
PED results
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please
note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window
Meter size
This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually
adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have
done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is
locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal
button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This
means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are
saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter
The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters
Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will
also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements
26 Warnings
Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the
green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is
pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or
expanded using the arrow on the right
Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next
Endress+Hauser Sales Centre
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
27 Button center
A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of
the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process
Print Sizing
Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports
Sizing Energy
Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the
Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow
Configurator
Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code
Add to shop basket
Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This
button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the
Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when
Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)
Reset
This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results
Back to top
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
3 Custody transfer
Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of
among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals
If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection
- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out
According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different
process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature
are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task
page
In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the
approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum
turn down is also checked
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your
entries
The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval
As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB
7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the
max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature
The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the
ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit
values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter
measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures
the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the
warning messages
Back to top
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
4 Accessories
There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories
page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)
In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg
mounting set 41) are executed
41 Accessories page
Example mounting set
Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations
Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)
42 Activating a checkbox
Example Flow conditioner
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are
automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and
process connection can be selected
43 Accessories within the order code
The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving
process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed
Applicator versions)
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
Back to top
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu
5 Fluid Properties page
51 General description
Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page
This view supports the following types of fluids
Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures
Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that
produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under
ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page
The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases
Liquids
Media type Standardprocess
Fluids not 100 water (example 0
Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)
Support points (linear interpolation)
Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97
Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-
Gas (Air) UDG)
Redlich-Kwong
Gases
Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas
engine
Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine
Air Ozone O3
Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)
Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr
Butane Nitric Oxide NO3
Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0
Carbon monoxide
Chlorine
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Hydrogen
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen sulphide
Krypton
Methane
Neon
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Xenon
0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User
Defined Gas Mixture 0
Oxygen
The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for
example density or viscosity
The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information
classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of
the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They
are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are
important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new
medium
The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The
parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll
to the group header you see on your screen
When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page
A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details
Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page
52 Parameter groups
521 Fluid information
In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible
Fluid name contains the name of the fluid
Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In
many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available
State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many
purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the
steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account
Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made
522 Fluid Description
The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid
Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian
Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid
Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and
syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or
measurement principle
Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is
flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals
Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive
Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for
conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to
50 microScm and more than 50 microScm
Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to
67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo
Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details
Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid
The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user
defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
523 Basic Fluid Parameters
The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be
created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages
Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid
Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid
Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point
Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid
Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas
The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has
an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also
depend on density and viscosity
In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and
sound velocity
524 Constants
This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas
type selected
Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken
from the Unit Defaults page
Molar mass molecular weight of the gas
Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)
Heating value calorific value of the gas
The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine
For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is
used to calculate the sound velocity
525 Typical Operating Conditions
The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions
Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state
The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the
mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of
the typical operating conditions are editable
526 Temperature Viscosity
This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description
The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function
of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve
for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range
527 Temperature Density
This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Density density at the support point
The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of
operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for
fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range
528 Temperature Heat capacity
This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature
Temperature temperature at the support point
Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point
The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
529 Temperature Vapor pressure
This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid
Temperature temperature at the support point
Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point
The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a
fluid as a function of operational temperature
5210 Gas mixture
The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture
Gas name of the gas (first field)
Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture
Unit unit for mass fraction
A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are
given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas
Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report
The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is
displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine
only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100
5211 Fluid properties and results
This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed
differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help
function
Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom
display ldquonardquo
The calculated constants are eg
Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions
Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions
Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions
Heating value the calorific value of the fluid
For liquids
Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data
displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page
AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in
the Fluid Properties page
For solids
a viscosity coefficient for the gas
n viscosity coefficient for gases
5212 Reference values
This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters
displayed differ according to the fluid selected
Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation
Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780
Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780
Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533
Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533
5213 Measuring task
The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of
the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details
opens a window with more information about the approval
5214 Restriction on flowmeters
This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates
that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details
opens a window with more information about the restrictions
53 Setting reference conditions
Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu
There are two possibilities
SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are
- pressure 10132 bar absolute
- temperature 0deg Celsius
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter
US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are
- pressure 14696 psi absolute
- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit
These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter
54 Creating a User Defined Fluid
Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the
world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids
1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field
Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid
at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam
2 Now click on the Properties button
3 When the page has opened click on New
4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate
fields which are now open for editing
When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database
Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system
fluids
If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields
will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General
parameters list and you can start again
If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit
button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close
button exits the page without saving the changes
55 Import and Export of Fluids
In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this
the import and export function of the fluid database can be used
In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information
are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want
to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export
button
Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database
To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file
56 Fluid Properties report
The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing
page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results
and reference values
Back to top
6 Compare size and sensor
61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)
When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose
Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the
ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function
When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The
displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter
The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by
clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the
corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table
will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can
be reapplied
The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you
click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed
as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator
can be reapplied
62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)
The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement
principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are
selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator
versions
Back to top
7 Chart page
71 Introduction
The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case
of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available
The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections
72 General Parameters
In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a
repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on
the sizing page
73 Process data
Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference
74 Curves
The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if
offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter
In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be
automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be
activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner
If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report
75 Flow limits
The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range
and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are
different
76 Chart
The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the
pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using
the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional
information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different
curves within the chart
The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons
The content of the printout depends on the options selected
Back to top
8 Order Code
Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order
information
In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring
principle and flowmeter These are as follows
Feature Description Order codeSizing
Definition of ideal
diameter
Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter
relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure
loss
Diameter (Order code
option)
Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and
installation data
Mounting set (Order code
option)
Determination of
insertion depth
Calculation of insertion depth depending on
the selected accessory (t-mass)
Pipe length (Order code
option)
Selection of Material
(Sensor)
Selection and verification of corrosion
consistency
Sensor material Liner
material (Order code
option)
Selection of Process
connection
Selection and verification of pressure and
temperature curve
Process connection (Order
code option)
Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order
code option)
Pressure equipment
directive (PED)
Definition of PED-category depending on the
application and verification of the offered
process connections
Additional approval (Order
code option)
Custody transfer Verification or specification of application
data definition of measuring range
Custody transfer (Order
code option)
Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow
conditioner)
Accessory enclosed or extra
position (Order code
option)
Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow
splitter
Sensor Options (Order code
option)
Evaluation of
measuring range
Calculation of measuring range Calculation
datachart
Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and
accessory where required
Calculation
datachart
Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation
datachart
Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion
database with relevant data
The Order code page consists of different frames
81 Order code
Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically
by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and
Configurator for the valid order codes
82 Order code options
Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration
options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the
order code
The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection
on the Sizing page
The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page
The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options
Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed
these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still
feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning
message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change
83 Extended order code
831 General
Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen
In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables
for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and
activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the
Extended order code feature is used
With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order
code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the
order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator
832 Device parameter data settings
To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is
not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the
ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator
The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo
84 Button center
The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to
proceed with your Sizing process
Configurator
Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order
code
Print Sizing
Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports
Save
This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves
the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable
Save to buffer
Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store
the product can be pasted into a project
Back to top
9 Conversion Calculator
Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity
All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by
selecting one out of the drop down lists
The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another
The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all
common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be
recalculated automatically
Back to top
10 Unit Defaults
Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings
menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored
whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session
Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily
for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button
Back to top
11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)
111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)
Disclaimer
The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from
publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and
assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a
minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion
fatigue life
The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different
process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined
Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check
Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled
The content of the database was sourced from
bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)
bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG
bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta
bull Various Internet Links
bull Various Corrosion data bases
The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application
and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process
temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows
Metal
Class Description depth of corrosion per surface
A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)
B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)
C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)
NR not recommended
U unknown
Plastics
Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength
A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear
B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year
lt=30 loss of tensile strength year
C not resistant lt= 50year
lt=50 loss of tensile strength year
NR not recommended
U unknown
Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used
112 Using Corrosion Check
Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion
information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability
of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not
appear at the top of the page
Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the
corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table
The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid
The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion
database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message
is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning
message
The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project
module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing
Back to top
12 Settings (Sizing Flow)
The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the
button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select
Sizing Flow
The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this
function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings
saved are loaded with the Load Default button
Setting Impact when activated
Basic functions
Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply
Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order
classification PED device check code page and printouts
Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits
The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits
No indication of default start data input of data by user
By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually
Advanced functions
Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)
The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles
Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates
My View
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
DP Flow
Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters
Activates said functions
Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP
flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it
Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person
Back to top
13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines
131 General
Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation
Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)
Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures
132 Fluid engine
General Information
The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the
fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor
Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both
liquids and for gases
Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data
Liquid Calculation
Calculation of the acentric factor Omega
Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure
Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby
bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC
bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database
bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms
bull
The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs
Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature
bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3
bull Alpha in 1K
bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K
bull Toper in K
bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3
The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs
Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature
bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3
bull AL (Viscosity factor)
bull BL (Viscosity factor)
bull Toper in K
bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt
Gas calculation
The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and
pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and
temperature
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull Zoper (Compressibility)
Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)
Toper in K
bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3
Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure
bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3
bull POper (Operating Press) in bara
bull c Kappa
Steam Calculation
Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard
The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard
(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use
The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from
bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and
bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa
This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only
That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms
Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator
133 Gas engine
The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the
fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine
The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of
the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted
process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine
Back to top
14 Print Sizing
The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured
and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page
The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens
bull Page format size margins orientation and format
bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter
bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report
Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed
bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo
bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout
Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered
Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page
Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are
possible Please check the help manual of the Project module
Back to top
15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)
The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by
manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002
The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection
options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator
takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable
flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and
Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can
switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow
The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator
1 Categorisation of the application
2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests
bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this
option
PED Categories
Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered
during the sizing and ordering process They include
bull All ultrasonic flowmeters
bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo
bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water
bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the
static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure
bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume
The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data
danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)
Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements
have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen
device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and
nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case
a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet
All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout
Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)
Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and
temperature are the main parameters
If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required
data in the min nom and max columns
If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the
necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating
Danger posed by the fluid
The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the
case of gases the stability of the gas is also important
The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo
according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)
All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations
belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is
above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture
bull H200-H205 (explosive)
bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)
bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)
bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)
bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)
bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)
bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)
In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in
Danger Symbols below
In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED
fluid groups
rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids
Order code
If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option
this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page
With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family
nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration
If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center
Danger Symbols
Danger symbol Explanation H-rates
C corrosive H 314
Cl chemical instable
E explosive H200-H205
F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223
F flammable H 225-H228
N environmental
dangerous
O oxidizing H271-H272
T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330
H372
T poisonous
Xi irritating
Xn injurious to health
Back to top
16 Online Update
The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator
Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes
and updated system databases with the latest products
The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator
newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the
Settings menu